operation manual

ManualsBrandsPhilips ManualsLED TVs55PFK6409/12

www.philips.com/welcome

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (116 pages)

PAGE 1
Register your product and get support at www.philips.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ - 6.5‬ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ )ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪7179/7189/7199/7500‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.1‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.2‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ( ‪1.3 - App gallery‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.4‬ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.5‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Ambilight+hue - 1.6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Skype - 1.7‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.8‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ - 1.9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.10‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪EasyLink - 1.11‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪- 2.1‬‬ ‫‪- 2.
PAGE 3
‫‪ - 17.1‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ - 17.2‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ - 17.3‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Skype - 18‬‬ ‫‪- 25.1‬‬ ‫‪- 25.2‬‬ ‫‪- 25.3‬‬ ‫‪- 25.4‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.1‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.2‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.3‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.5‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.6‬ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.7‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.8‬ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.9‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.10‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪ - 18.
PAGE 4
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪)Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪) App gallery‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻭ‪.Twitter‬‬ ‫‪1.8‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪)Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪) App gallery‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪Philips MyRemote‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.
PAGE 6
‫‪1.10‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪّﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪VESA MIS-F 200x100، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-40 6700‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-48/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x200، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-55 6600‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-65/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x400, M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-40 6600‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-48/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x200، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-55 6500‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x400, M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-32 6500‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-42/‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-47/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x200، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-55 6400‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x400, M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ
PAGE 8
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺟﺪًﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‪)Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪) on Switching‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ WPS.‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭّﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬ ‪WEP،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ WPS‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ‪.WPS‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪3.
PAGE 10
‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪.‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ .IP‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Netflix‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Netflix‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ" ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪EasyLink،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ CEC HDMI EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪،EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪.EasyLink CEC‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪4.
PAGE 13
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Y Pb Pr -‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ Pr Pb Y‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ YPbPr‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ .HD‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ Pb‬ﻭ ‪ ،Pr‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.CVBS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛّﺐ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻥﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1.
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ EasyLink‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ EasyLink‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ CEC HDMI‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ‪ TV CAM‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪CI+‬‬ ‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪CI+.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪STB -‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +CI‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻛﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +CI‬ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ SCART‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ARC HDMI‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ))‪ (Toslink‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪ 4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﻮّﺷًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫‪ /Scart‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪CVBS -‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ‬ ‫‪.‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ )‪(CVBS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(CVBS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ R/L‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ‪ R/L‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ SCART.‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪SCART‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ‪ CVBS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SCART‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 19
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪.Recording‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.11‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (HID-USB‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) GUIDE TV ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪) USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (HID-USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SOURCE ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) EXIT ‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪4.14‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛّﺐ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪4.15‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ /Scart‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪CVBS -‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ YPbPr‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SCART‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺕ < ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪) Wireless speaker‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( < ‪Add new‬‬‫‪) speaker‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻤ‪/‬ﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪7500 ،7100‬‬ ‫‪) TV SMART  - 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪.TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ‪، ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) INFO  - 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) BACK  - 4‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ TV Smart‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) LIST  - 4‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Channel  - 5‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪) Mute  - 6‬ﻛﺘﻢ(‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TEXT - 7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪/‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.
PAGE 26
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ" ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪ - .‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SUBTITLE - 3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) LIST  - 8‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪) LIST  - 4‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Channel  - 5‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪)  - 7‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ( ‪Backspace‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣؤﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪)  - 8‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ( ‪Share this‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Cyrillic‬ﻭ ‪Qwerty‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪*.Cyrillic / Qwerty‬‬ ‫‪) Volume  - 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Cyrillic‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Qwerty‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (Shift‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺎ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻳُﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪OK‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ‪. End of use‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪LIST ‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀّﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ < ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ < ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﺑﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﻛﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ( ‪.Picture format‬‬ ‫‪2 -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪..
PAGE 34
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪OPTIONS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺚّ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P.O.T‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺺ ‪..P.O.T‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪..‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫<ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫<ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.
PAGE 36
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK.‬‬‫<ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫<ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪iTV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.iTV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ‬ﻭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪)  Play‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ( ‪Pause‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ iTV.‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪Stop‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻧﺺ( ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺟﺢ‪،‬‬‫ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪّﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ( ‪Re-install < Search for channels‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ( ‪ channels‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪DVB-T + DVB-C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ T-DVB‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺖّﺛﺒ ‪DVB-C.‬ﻭ ‪ DVB-T‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪DVB-C،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪Channel < Channel settings‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ( ‪Analogue : Manual installation < installation‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.2‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪. . .
PAGE 41
‫‪8.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ)ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ( ‪Favourites‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪Child lock < Satellite settings‬‬‫<)ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ‪ Change code‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ(‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻟﻪ‪.8888‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪،Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻘﻤﺮ ‪ Unicable‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫< ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 7‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ . OK‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﺿﻌﺎﻑ( ‪Hearing impaired‬ﻭ ‪On‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ(‪Audio language‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ( ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ 3/4‬ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LNB‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺛﺎﻥٍ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﻜّﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺮٍ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺛﺎﻥٍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣؤﺷﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫"ﺑﺤﺚ" ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ •.
PAGE 47
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪ TV Smart‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ )ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺪٍ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Change‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ‪.day‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ‪ Previous day‬ﺃﻭ )ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ‪ Today‬ﺃﻭ ‪Next day‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ ،OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪11‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ( ‪ connections‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12.1‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ ‪2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ‪2‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬‫‪ 4 -‬ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13.
PAGE 52
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪ LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻀﻴء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪ LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪13.5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ )ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺏ( ‪.Two-player gaming‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺟﻠﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )‪ 3D‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ‪. 3D effect‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) Off‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ (3D‬ﺃﻭ )ﺃﻗﻞ( ‪) Less‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ‪) Normal‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪ 3D‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ( ‪)More‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪13.6‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘّﻊ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺟﻠﺲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻣﺘﺮ‪.
PAGE 54
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ‪ PTA507 Philips -‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA508‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ PTA519.‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA518‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA517‬ﺃﻭ ‪PTA509‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ‪. . .
PAGE 55
‫ ‪2‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪ ،Picture and sound‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Two-player‬‬ ‫)ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ( ‪ gaming‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‪) Photos ‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺃﻭ ‪)‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ Music‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Videos ‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪) Folders ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪15.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Sort ‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ 32‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Music ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) all Play ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.- ‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ‪Wi-Fi Miracast.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Miracast‬‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Miracast‬ﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Miracast‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.direct Fi-Wi‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪OK‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪Pause TV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ‪ 90‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪).‬ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪Pause‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Record ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ .Record‬ﻳﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ‪ Schedule‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .OK‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪‬‬ ‫‪) Forward‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪‬‬ ‫‪) Rewind‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ‪) Pause ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪. ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪Stop‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼً ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻻً ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰﻓﺸﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪OK.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ‪،‬ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﺖ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺘﻚ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ…‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Remove‬‬‫)ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ . OK‬ﺗُﺰﺍﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫‪18.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Skype‬ﺳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﺭؤﻳﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Skype‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ‪ Skype‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻨﺸﻐﻼً ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻤﺤﺖ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺭﻓﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊﺭﻓﻀﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪Skype.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ، Skype‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ‪.Zoom out‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Done ‬ﺗﻢ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫‪18.10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠّﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Skype‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺠّﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ .Skype‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴّﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Back ‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ‪ Skype‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Skype‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﻟﻐﻴﻦ ‪ 18‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫‪19.4‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪19.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LED Smart Philips‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻼً(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ‪ .
PAGE 71
‫ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺄﺟﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺄﺟﺮﺗﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪20.3‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪20.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ room Multi‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮّﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯَﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ room Multi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻖ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Philips‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬‬ ‫<)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ < Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪Network settings‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( < )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ( ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ…‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ( ‪  Share this‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪) TV Smart‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) TV Smart‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ .2009‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ "‪ ،"5‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ .2010‬ﺃﻣّﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "6‬ﻓﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2011‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2012‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪2013.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MyRemote‬‬ ‫‪22.1‬‬ ‫‪22.2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MyRemote‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺠﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪّﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ MyRemote‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .
PAGE 76
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ MyRemote‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺎًﺃﻳﻀ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ‪www.philips.com/support.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪22.5‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪TV guide‬‬ ‫)ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪MyRemote.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Fi-Wi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﺴﻨّﻰ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Fi-Wi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪23.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ( ‪ Audio language‬ﺃﻭ )ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ( ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ( ‪ Network, wireless‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ( ‪.Network, wired‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪. . .
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ISF‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺨﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ISF‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ <‬‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬‫<ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.
PAGE 83
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ‪Medium‬ﺃﻭ )ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ( ‪Minimum‬ﺃﻭ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪.Off‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ < ‪.Ultra resolution‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ On‬ﺃﻭ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪.Off‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻔﻪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪.HDMI ARC‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ -‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ‪)‬ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ( ﻭ ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ‪ ،Ambilight‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ‪.Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ‪ < Ambilight‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ‪.
PAGE 88
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ‪Ambilight+hue < Ambilight‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪ Ambilight+hue‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ,‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ hue+Ambilight‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻛﻴﺰﺓ ‪ hue Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪Ambilight < TV settings‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪Lounge light+hue‬‬ ‫< )ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ( ‪< Advanced‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.(hue+‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ On‬ﺃﻭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪.Off‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻴﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻠﻮّﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Ambilight.
PAGE 90
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ( ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ < ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ < ﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ < ﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪www.philips.com/TV‬‬ ‫‪24.
PAGE 92
‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪1080p×1920 :‬‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ‪) T-DVB :PxK‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ( ‪COFDM‬‬‫‪) QAM‬ﻛﺒﻞ( ‪ DVB-C‬؛‪2K/8K‬‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ‪) C-DVB ،T2-DVB :PxT‬ﻛﺒﻠ(؛ ‪QAM‬‬‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪PAL ،SECAM ،NTSC :‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪IEC/ISO) HD/SD MPEG2 :‬‬ ‫)‪ MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC 14496-10‬؛)‪13818-2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(13818-3 IEC/ISO‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪FHD/HD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ — ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪• 480i - 60‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗ
PAGE 93
‫‪24.5‬‬ ‫‪24.7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪(7100‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪www.philips.com/support‬‬ ‫‪42PFx7109‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 949‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 551‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 53‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±10.
PAGE 94
‫‪ 19.5±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1230.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 772‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 280‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 21±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪48PFx6609‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1082‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 625‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 57‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±10.8‬‬ ‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1082‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 683‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 223‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±12.2‬‬ ‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪55PFx7199‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1230.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 712‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 35.8‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 19.
PAGE 95
‫• ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪RJ45 : LAN‬‬ ‫‪24.11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪(6100/6400‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪ARC‬‬ ‫‪• USB 2.0‬‬ ‫‪40PFx6409‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 911.3‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 528‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 61.8‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 8.1±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 911.3‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 587.3‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 213.1‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 9.3±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪ARC‬‬ ‫‪• USB 2.
PAGE 96
‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪JPEG :‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪20‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫@ ‪ High Profile‬ﺇﻟﻰ ًﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ )‪– MPEG-4 AVC (H.264‬‬ ‫‪L4.1.‬‬ ‫‪ Advanced Profile @ L3.‬ﺇﻟﻰ ًﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪– VC-1‬‬ ‫*™‪Wi-Fi Certified Miracast‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.x.
PAGE 97
‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪Vision TP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪25.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 98
Source: http://www.ijg.org/ source code used on the Philips TV, which fall either under the GNU General Public License (the GPL), or the GNU Lesser General Public License (the LGPL), or any other open source license. Instructions to obtain source code for this software can be found in the user manual. libmng (1.0.10) libmng -THE reference library for reading, displaying, writing and examining Multiple-Image Network Graphics.MNG is the animation extension to the popular PNG image-format.
PAGE 99
This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the SquashFS license, which can be found below. Source: http://squashfs.sourceforge.net/ xml paser; Expat is an XML parser library written in C. It is a stream-oriented parser in which an application registers handlers for things the parser might find in the XML document (like start tags). An introductory article on using.
PAGE 100
This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the electric-fence license, which can be found below. Source: www.live555.com system with read-write support. NTFS-3G often uses the FUSE file system interface, so it can run unmodified on many different operating systems. It is runnable on Linux, FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenSolaris, BeOS, QNX, WinCE, Nucleus, VxWorks, Haiku,MorphOS, and Mac OS X It is licensed under either the GNU General Public License or a proprietary license.
PAGE 101
Provides developer documentation for the utilities used by Linux systems to load and manage kernel modules (commonly referred to as "drivers"). Source: https://modules.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_Page It is intended to conform to the IEEE POSIX P1003.2/ISO 9945.2 Shell and Tools standard. It offers functional improvements over sh for both programming and interactive use. In addition, most sh scripts can be run by Bash without modification. Source: http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/ ncurses (5.
PAGE 102
microhttpd (libmicrohttpd-0.9.9.tar.gz) GNU libmicrohttpd is a small C library that is supposed to make it easy to run an HTTP server as part of another application. The original download site for this software is : http://www.gnu.org/software/libmicrohttpd/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2.1 license Source: http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/libmicrohttpd/libmicrohttpd0.9.9.tar.gz udhcpc (0.9.
PAGE 103
Libupnp (1.2.1) The Linux* SDK for UPnP* Devices (libupnp) provides developers with an API and open source code for building control points, devices, and bridges that are compliant with Version 1.0 of the UPnP Device Architecture Specification. Source: http://upnp.sourceforge.net/ mDNSResponder (mDNSResponder-320.10.80) The mDNSResponder project is a component of Bonjour, Apple's ease-of-use IP networking initiative:
PAGE 104
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.Philips‬‬ ‫‪26.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪26.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 107
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤّﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪TP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺎﺟﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪Vision‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪27.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮّﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Philips‬ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪ (EMF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ Philips‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﻛﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Vision TP‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﻨًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ .Inc ،DTS‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ © ‪..Inc ،DTS‬‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Java‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Java‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Oracle‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫™‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft.‬ﺃﻭ‪/‬ﻭ ‪© 2013 Skype‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "‪ "S‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪MHEG‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪") MHEG‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ"( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ"( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪LIMITED SYSTEMS CLIENT T&S‬‬ ‫)"ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ"(‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Kensington‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Kensington‬ﻭ‪ Saver Micro‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ World ACCO‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪87 Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪89 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪7 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪87 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪89 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪89 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫‪89 Ambilight، ISF‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪15 CAM -‬‬ ‫‪17 CI+‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( ‪37 DVB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪38 DVB،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪12 DVI،‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪13 EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪14 EasyLink،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪14 EasyLink،‬‬ ‫‪95 ESD‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪69 Facebook‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪35 HbbTV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪16 HDCP،‬‬ ‫‪12 HDMI AR
PAGE 113
‫ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪56‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪35‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪35‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪39‬‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪87‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪57‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪91‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪57‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪29‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
PAGE 114
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ‪84‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪85‬‬ ‫‪ 83‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪105‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪84‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪56‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ‪84‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪109‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪108‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ‪53‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪Plus Pixel‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ‪95‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
PAGE 115
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ‪105‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪56‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ‪94‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪92‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﻍ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻣﺎ ‪84‬‬ ‫‪115‬‬
PAGE 116
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org) Contact information Argentina 0800 444 7749 Buenos Aires 0810 444 7782 België / Belgique 070 700 035 (0,15€/min.) Bosna i Hercegovina 033 941 251 (Lokalni poziv) Brazil 0800 701 0245 Sao Paulo 2938 0245 Бълария 02 4916 273 (Национален номер) Česká republika 228880895 (Místní tarif) Danmark 3525 8314 Deutchland 0180 501 04 69 (0,14€/Min.) Ελλάδα 2111983028 (Εθνική κλήση) España 902 88 10 83 (0,10€ + 0,08€/min.